Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 .

2 .

and plumbing fixtures. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. Add more detailed modelling elements. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. electrical panels. such as duct. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. fixtures. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Germany. such as mechanical equipment. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and piping. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. 3 . and plumbing engineering workflows. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. electrical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.

Contact your CAD manager for more information. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. as well as how to open and save them. templates. So. and sheets to document the project. you can choose to save your work. Create schedules.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. annotations. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. For example. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. however. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. When you open a training file. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. NOTE Depending on your installation. After completing each exercise. views. you learn where the training files are located. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an _m suffix. For example. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. and tags. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. In this exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. such as templates and families. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. when you add ductwork. On the Contents tab. is located and accessed in the training files location. However. to provide a richer and more finished design. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. When you install the training files as instructed. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. You do not design entire systems. Create detail views.

the Open dialog displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and you can open any supported file type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. verify that Project Files (*. double-click Imperial or Metric. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. 3 In the right pane. You may close the file with or without saving changes. you are prompted to save the changes. 4 Click the training file name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. For Files of type.rvt. click ➤ Save As.rvt) is selected. For example. and click the Training Files icon. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt and make changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. enter the new file name. if you open settings. scroll down. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Open. and click Save.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. a list of file types displays. For File name. select the folder in which to save the new file. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 8 If you have made changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 .

Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and phases when you need it. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. schedules. scope. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. every drawing sheet. drawings. hence. quantities. In this case. If you move the partition. drawing sheets. the floor or roof remains connected. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is one of association or connection. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. As you work in drawing and schedule views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. 2D and 3D view. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If the length of the elevation is changed. ■ ■ 7 . sections. and plans. the door retains this relationship to the partition. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the operation of the software is parametric. You learn the terminology. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the hierarchy of elements. and schedules required for a building project. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In the Revit MEP model.

sinks. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. and electrical panels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines. They display in relevant views of the design. ducts. Datum elements help to define project context. sprinklers. sprinklers. and keynotes are annotation elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ducts. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. When you change something. levels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. walls and ceilings are hosts. filled regions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. dimensions. boilers. For example. sinks. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. dimensions.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. tags. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. tags. They help to describe or document the design. and electrical panels. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. boilers. and 2D detail components. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. grids.

they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you can explicitly control them. you must be in a section or elevation view. North . by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. such as roofs. schedules. and types. programming is not required. By using a single project file. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Most often. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. For example. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. first floor. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. and drawings of the design. The project file contains all information for the building design. Often. and ceilings. To place levels. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. or bottom of foundation. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. In other cases. In Revit MEP. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. section views. and so forth). Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. from geometry to construction data. views of the project. top of wall. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. for example. you do nothing to establish these relationships. elevation views. This information includes components used to design the model. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. If you can draw. However. families. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. floors. Project: In Revit MEP.

For example. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. identical use. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. A type can be a specific size of a family. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. For example. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. Unlike system and standard component families. or layer the views to see only the one on top. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. With a few clicks. pipes. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. A type can also be a style. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. each in-place family contains only a single type. System families include ducts. Type: Each family can have several types. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). showing. and wires. such as a 30” X 42” title block. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. hiding. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families can be transferred between projects. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. and similar graphical representation. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Then experiment with them. However. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work.

click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.

tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and settings. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. When working on the Modify tab. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. project and system parameters. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. data and systems. and for switching views. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. select the tool first. and CAD files. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. then select what you want to modify. architect-specific tools. tools used for editing existing elements..

an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. closes the application menu (double-click). Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. when adding duct. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides requested information. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). For example. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides access to common tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. displays frequently used tools. By default. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a file to open. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Open) save the current drawing. such as Export and Publish.. select a template and create a new drawing.. (Export) On the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name...The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.

(Licensing) close the file. click. To enable or disable a tool item. or template file. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. family..On the application menu. or template file. Camera.. to. and Walkthrough. (Publish) print the current drawing. annotation. saves a current project. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. but is not enabled by default. family. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. provides views including Default 3D. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. publish the current project. annotation. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 ... customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Print) access product and license information.

Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. To hide the Status Bar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. When you are using a command. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. check the Status Bar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. In addition. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. This displays the command history in a list. or the Family Editor. Starting with the most recent command. displaying the same information. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Clipboard. Modify. However. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Clear the Status Bar check mark. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command.To undo or redo a series of operations. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. When you are highlighting an element or component. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. when you switch to another editing mode. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Group. workshared components. To show the Status Bar again. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. repeat the command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down.

including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . select one or more elements of the same category. for example. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify).To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. To change existing elements to a different type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Zoom the view In the tutorials.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. For example. There are several ways to access zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click Training Files. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.rvt. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. In the following steps. After you are familiar with these tasks. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.

6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. on the Navigation bar. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Modifying the View | 19 . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. In the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.

and click tin the Options dialog. 14 To exit the wheel. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. As you move the mouse. Click and drag to orbit the design. click the SteeringWheels tab. moving the wheel to the desired location. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ➤ Options.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and then using the Zoom tool again. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press ESC.

and select the duct.Design. These are the drag controls. Similar controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . When drawing or modifying an MEP design. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Small blue dots. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. as shown. bottoms.Design ➤ Floor Plans. display along the ends. 2 Enter ZR. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.HVAC Plan . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and open Level 2 . called drag controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. referred to as shape handles. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click the Undo command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. on the Standard toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. In this example. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Move. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.3 Click and drag the bottom control. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or press CTRL+Z. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. select the first item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 6 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

10 Move the cursor to the right. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. In this case. as shown. for example. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and click again to specify the ending position. 11 With the duct already selected.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Some commands. and drag it to the left as shown. click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to move. The duct is moved to the new position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

Press ESC twice. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click OK. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.Return. 14 Enter VG. Select Mechanical .End a command Some commands. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Supply. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 13 To end a command. For example. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

under Create new. settings. 27 . Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and modify system settings. such as ducts and pipes. link files. 2 In the New Project dialog. create and manage views. system families. click Browse. You can either select a template from the template library. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and click Open. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. under Template file. and loadable families. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. use copy/monitor. such as the default project units and settings. 6 Click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. New projects inherit all the families. select Project. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can choose from several templates. Finally.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template.rte template. In that case. the default building levels and standard views. such as coordination review and interference checking. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and geometry from the starting template. you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Training files. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files.

for Energy Data. navigate to Imperial Templates. select Manchester. When you select the material. ■ ■ Under Create new. under Energy Analysis. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. ■ For Building Construction. you can select it now. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. and open North. 10 Using the same method. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 In the drawing area. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click OK. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select School or University. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the Choose Template dialog. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. for City. (Browse). NH. To maintain office standards and reduce rework.7 In the Project Browser. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. review the construction materials listed. Click Cancel. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . If you want to use a template other than the default. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.rte template and click Open. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Edit. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click (Browse). select Level 1. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Click OK twice. For Location. create another new project using the Construction template. For example. select Project template. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. click Browse. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules.

Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and demand factors for electrical systems. 33 Click OK. 24 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. piping. and 5 1/2". Holding CTRL. plumbing. click Rectangular. select Identity Data. for 3 1/2". power distribution systems. and fire protection systems. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 22 In the right pane. For Categories. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 10 1/2".rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 11 1/2". 25 In the left pane.rfa and click Open. for 3 1/2". wiring. click Wiring. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. After standard settings have been established for an organization. and 12 1/2". click Sizes. under Pipe Settings. 23 In the left pane. Click OK twice. 4 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. 4 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 5 1/2". select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . For Ground Wire Tick Mark. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. click Round. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 26 In the right pane. select Views. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 3/4".

click Training.rvt. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. click Browse. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Auto . 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 5 Click OK. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Associated Level. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Family and Type. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. For Sort by. select View Name. sheets.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. families. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Sub-Discipline.Origin to Origin. For Then by. For Then by. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. In addition. and groups that are contained in a project. From the Positioning list. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. To enable this coordination. Click Open. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog. Select Ascending Click OK twice. under Create new. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 38 Close the file. select Project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

15 Under Library Name. Save. and change the name to My Library. Load. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and click OK twice. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and Import dialogs. and click (Browse). and select it as the library path. or families. click the My Library icon. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ➤ Open. and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click My Library.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value).

21 On the File Locations tab. 20 Click ➤ Options. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. such as bump maps. and decal image files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 2 In the Options dialog. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. If you want to relocate this path. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click OK. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. If you work in a large office. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 22 Select My Library. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 27 Click OK. view the current path. click Places. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. This path is determined during installation.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 5 In the text editor. 3 Under Settings. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 9 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. specify the new location here. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 19 Click Cancel. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 11 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 14 Click in the drawing area. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. custom color files. select Ignore words in uppercase. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Edit.

5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK. 25 Close the file without saving it. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and enter 1 . click Edit. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you modify snap increments. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. delete sheetmtl-CU. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 19 In the Options dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Close. 2 In the New Project dialog. 20 Under Settings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ .17 In the Spelling dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. 22 In the text editor. 23 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. work with snapping turned off. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. As you zoom in and out within a view.rte. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. In this exercise. click OK. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Training Files. click Restore Defaults. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Dimension Snaps. under Template file.

enter SM. and move the cursor to the right. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. zoom out until it does so. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. This is the increment that you added previously. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. TIP To zoom while sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 10 On the Options Bar. such as ZO to zoom out. deselect Chain.7 Under Object Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. For example. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If it does not. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint.

This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the midpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 25 Click OK. If you move the cursor along the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and move the cursor to the right. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that snapping is once again active. and the wall edges. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . with or without saving it. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and delete the value 1’ . 22 Move the cursor downward. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 26 Close the file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Enter SM. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

water source heat pump (WSHP). Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This system consists of a cooling tower. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. methodology. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. At the end of the tutorial. As you create the mechanical system. In this lesson. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and then you create a plenum level. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. go to http://www. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.autodesk. you will understand the process. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you can choose to save your work. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. After finishing each exercise. By following the recommended workflow. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you first plan the system. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. duct system and a hydronic piping system.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you first configure the linked architectural model. In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 45 .

make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Next. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and after the linked model highlights. you add a level for plenums. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. roof. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. select Room Bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. click to select it.Space Plan is highlighted. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. ceilings. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. click Training Files. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. not in the MEP training file. In this section.rvt. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Constraints. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE When working with a linked file. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.

offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 On the Draw panel. The new level is placed. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Click Plan View Types. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and double-click West . 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and click OK. enter 8'. Preparing Spaces | 47 . those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.6 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 16 Press Esc. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and in the Plan View Types dialog. and enter Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.MEP. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). For Offset.

You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. For Cut plane. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. enter 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select Design. you place spaces in areas of the building model. Under Identity Data. select Plenum Plan. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. you can choose to save your work. and then place spaces in various types of areas. right-click Level 2 Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. for Default View Template. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. select Level Above (Level 3). enter an Offset of 1' 0". This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under Extents. for Top. For Sub-Discipline. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 21 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE After finishing each exercise. However. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. and click Properties. for View Scale. for Level.Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. and for Offset. Under View Depth. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for View Range. In this exercise. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. For View Classification.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. In the next exercise. select MEP . Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this exercise. ■ Click OK twice.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. Placing Spaces | 49 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 2 Plenum. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. select New. For Space. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. and ceilings). walls. enter 0. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Upper Limit. For Offset. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Horizontal.rvt. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For (Tag Location).

ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. enter 219. for Number. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.7 Click to place the space. For Name. enter Library. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously. Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. and then click Modify. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select Level 3. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. you place a space in a large corridor area. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files. and for Offset. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 5 On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.

and press Enter. enter Corridor. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 10 Using the same method. as shown. change the space number to 216A. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Close the schedule view. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 9 In the floor plan. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. double-click the space name. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.7 In the Project Browser. and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. you place a space in a chase.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. If necessary. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).

Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . enter 0. 10 In the plan view. select Level 3. For Number. On the Options Bar. Under Identity Data. for Upper Limit. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. expand Spaces. for Upper Limit. select Roof Level. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select the space. For Offset. enter 225PC. 6 Enter VG. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Name. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Interior and Reference. In the plan view. enter Chase. click in the chase area to place the space. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.4 Press Esc. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. and click Element Properties. 12 Click in the section view. For Limit Offset. enter 4'. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and then click OK. right-click.

and click OK. select Space Tag With Volume. All spaces in the view are tagged. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and maximize the view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Loaded Tags. floors. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 17 Type ZF. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan.Bounding elements (such as walls. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. In the next exercises. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. ceilings. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 15 Press Esc. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. To display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . you view and verify zones in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. In this exercise. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Notice that Default is currently the only zone.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. which removes the space from the Default zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Zoning is highlighted. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). under Spaces. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Reference. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. it is automatically added to the Default zone. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. click View ➤ Zones. 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.

You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.5 In the System Browser. Instruction 221. under Spaces. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To display space reference lines. the Edit Zone tab displays. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. select Occupiable.Zoning is highlighted. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Using the Edit Zone tab. double-click 121 Cafeteria. As you do this. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can add or remove a space from the zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and click Finish Editing Zone. click Training Files. and modify the zone properties. The Zone tool is active. you assign spaces to a zone. under Energy Analysis. and Electrical 220 spaces. 4 In the drawing area. Next. and a new zone is created. select Computer Lab 222. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and click OK. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. click Reference.

Click OK.In the System Browser. Expand HVAC Zones. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . To view the zone in the drawing area. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction. type VG. 5 With the drawing area active. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

9 In the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. enter 2 . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Area B. click Reference. In this exercise.rvt. under Spaces. for Name. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.West .Zoning. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Identity Data. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. expand 2 . 11 Close the System Browser. click Finish Editing Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. To display space reference lines. and click OK. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Zoning is highlighted.West . You activated zone visibility in the views.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning view to activate it. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 Press Esc. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Select Attached End. Verify that the distance is 1/2". select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. zoom out. 8 In the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.5 Click in the Level 1 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning floor plan. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning view. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .

18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. double-click the zone tag. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.rvt. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. on the ViewCube. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Front. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. In this exercise.Zoning view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the corner where the Top. space. and zone information. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.Zoning to make it the active view. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify the building.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.East. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and click OK. enter Lounge . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. for Name Value. double-click Level 1 .

Using the Highlight tool. verify that Wireframe is selected. Next. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. With 109 Lounge selected. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. and select 109 Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). click (Isolate). ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Click (Highlight). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. you isolate the space.

Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and then click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. For Construction Type. and then click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. click . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select 1_South_Lounge. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). ■ ■ ■ Next. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. the space information displays for the selected space. and in the People dialog. For People. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Below the list of spaces and zones. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select Lounge/Recreation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. For Electrical Loads. scroll down in the left pane. click .■ On the Details tab. verify that <Building> is selected. Next. select 109 Lounge. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and click OK.

you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and other room-bounding components. the zone information displays for the selected zone. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and dehumidification set point. heating air temperature. verify that 74. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. floors. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. cooling air temperature. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Below the list of spaces and zones. and air changes per hour. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. click (Shading).00 °F : N/A is specified. outdoor air per area. 12 Using the methods learned previously. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. For Cooling Information. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. verify that <Building> is selected. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : 90. verify that 70. roofs.00 °F : N/A is specified. Next.00 °F : 54. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. This indicates the cooling set point. For Heating Information. and humidification set point.

select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Name. Click OK. For Offset. Under Energy Analysis. Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Plenum. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. enter 212P. Because this is an unoccupied space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 0. for Number. select Level 3. select Plenum. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. open MEP . 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Cancel.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 15 In the Project Browser.

25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. for City. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. is selected. For Postal Code. under Energy Analysis. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . for Energy Data. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. you verified building. click Edit. verify that Manchester. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. On the Place tab. NH. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. select School or University. For Location. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . double-click Level 2 . enter 03101. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan. and select space Plenum 212P. click in the Value field.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. In this exercise. and zone information. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

verify that New Construction is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. For Building Construction. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). or neither. select space Library 219. 8 In the drawing area. ft. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Sensible. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Ground Plane. enter 200 Btu/h. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Latent. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Specified. for Building Service. verify that <Building> is specified.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. click Edit. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. enter 150 Btu/h. and click OK. For Condition Type. you need to select this option. under Volume Computations. select Heated and cooled. select Specified. for Values. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. and click Element Properties. right-click. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Library . and click OK. For Project Phase. If. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Export Complexity. verify that Level 1 is selected. For People. click in the Value column. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. Select Area per person. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. ■ On the Weather tab. verify that Occupiable is selected. a cooling load. both. In order to select a space. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. and then click . Click OK twice. and enter 50 sq. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. verify that 1' 0" is specified. for Values.Audio Visual. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Space Type.

and can be modified here. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Location. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Next. select Actual. select Actual. For Building Construction. 12 Click the Details tab. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that School or University is selected. for Values. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Manchester. is specified. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. for Values. click Calculate. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Electrical Loads.■ ■ ■ Click OK. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Click OK twice. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . You should correct the space error in the building model. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). verify that <Building> is specified. Under Power. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. There should be no warnings displayed. select 219 Library. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. You have verified the building information. Select the space associated with the warning. and under Heating Information. NH. and click OK. click Edit. click Information). If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Service.

you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. space. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. under Energy Analysis. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. click to the right of the building to place the legend. select HVAC Zones. click Training Files. 15 Review the loads report for project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 After you review the loads report. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . or make any changes to the model. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and a loads report displays. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 17 In the loads report. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and zone information for the building model. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. select 219 Library. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.Space Plan. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 21 Click OK. weather. space. For Color Scheme. In this exercise. 3 In the drawing area.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. or zone information. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. and click OK. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Schemes. select Tonnage Range. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. select the color scheme legend.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

select Spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. select New Construction. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. enter Space Airflow Schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. For Name. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.12 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. For Phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building.rvt. click Training Files. for Select available fields from. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 .Space Fill is the active view. Select Schedule building components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. more category options are available. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In this exercise. Click OK. In the next exercise. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

Select Ascending. select Number. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Air Flow. select Airflow Delta. For Type. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. In the Fields dialog.■ Under Available fields. and then click . and then click Conditional Format. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Formula. for Formula. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter . In the Calculated Value dialog. Header. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select HVAC. For Then by. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Level. and then select Hidden field. ■ Click Calculated Value. and Blank line. select Level. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Not Between. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Formula. For Discipline. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Fields. click (Browse). Click OK. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter Airflow Delta. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test.

you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. click the color swatch. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK twice. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. In the Color dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . In this exercise. Under Conditions to Use. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. a view opens that contains the selected space. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. verify that Show is highlighted. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the next lesson.■ ■ ■ For Value. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In later exercises. and click OK. right-click to access schedule properties. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. ■ The schedule displays. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. select red. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. For Background Color.

78 .

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 . Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. After completing the air systems lesson. As you place the air terminals. and work with the airflow schedule. you will create supply air systems. After system creation.

3 In the ceiling view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.

18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and press Enter. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. select the diffuser. and press Enter. for Flow.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. click Place on Face. as shown. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. type 12. and then press Esc to end the command.Rectangular Face Round Neck .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. If the host element is modified or moved. 9 On the Placement panel.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The schedule updates with the new flow data. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. verify that Constrain is cleared.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . enter 425 CFM. 15 On the Options Bar. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Also. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor down. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and select Supply Diffuser .

and then press Esc. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Place on Face. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 24 In the Open dialog. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 28 On the Placement tab.rfa. Next. as shown. As you place the return diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers. 25 In the drawing area. click Yes. and click Open. 21 On the Options Bar. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 27 Select Return Diffuser . select each of the 5 supply diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 29 Place 2 diffusers. clear Leader.

and click OK. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . Level. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 32 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. as shown. click Yes. for Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 31 In the alert dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the return diffusers. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Strong Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. under Other. and click to select the lines.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. ■ ■ For the end point. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click the Level 1 line. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . For the start point. enter 9' 0"2750. and click OK.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and click View ➤ Systems. You then create the logical connection between the system components.Design is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Press Esc. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . including energy analysis. However. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . When you highlight a space. After creating the logical connection. In this exercise. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. right-click the title. the space crossing lines display.

review the Number of Elements. Connect Into. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. As you add diffusers to systems. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. the number of elements is updated. 11 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. System Name. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 15 Click Cancel. 6 Keep the System Browser open. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and Flow value. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the System Browser.IMPORTANT In the System Browser.

you create ductwork to physically connect system components. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. under Identity Data. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 18 Click OK. 22 Click OK. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. which updates the name in the System Browser. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. for Mark. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 25 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for System Name. the air terminals are the children. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the system connects them. In this exercise. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. Rename the system Next. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.17 Using the method learned previously. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space).

indicating that it’s the active view. the space crossing lines display. the Network type provides several solutions. and display solution 1. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.HVAC Plan. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select the upper left diffuser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. In this case. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt. Also. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A Generate Layout tab displays. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 4 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. click Training Files. select Network. for Solution Type. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. which provides various layout tools.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.

7 On the Options Bar. For Flex Duct Type. click Modify. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. you’ll get an error in a later step. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Offset.Round. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. enter 9' 10 1/2". select Flex Duct Round : Flex . enter 9' 10 1/2". Select Branch. as shown. Click OK. For Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. click Settings. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. enter 3'. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct.11 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. as is the elbow itself. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.

and click to select it. and equipment. thus it is not part of the system. and then click OK. for Color Scheme. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. select By View. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. but not all values are used in this view. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. a disconnection exists. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. select Duct Color Fill . the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. The first time you press Tab. and click OK. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. fittings.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. for Values Displayed. highlight a segment of the main duct. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Using a flow-based color scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.Flow. Usually. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. under Graphics. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. If the entire network does not highlight. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab.

select one of the diffusers in the system. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select Duct Color Fill . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 20 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Airflow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and press Enter. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.Velocity. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select the color scheme legend. and click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. for Flow. under Mechanical . select the WSHP. for Schemes. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.

28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. highlight a segment of the duct. Select Restrict Height. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Calculated Size Only. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. Click OK. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and drag it to the right. and enter . and then click to select it. select Friction. Select Only. Select the upper segment of main duct. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. for Branch Sizing. click Cancel. The ductwork and fittings are updated.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and select 16".

pressure. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure loss. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. static pressure. Using this tool. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Use the information that displays (flow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.NOTE As you inspect a system. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. also known as the critical path. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and select the WSHP.HVAC Plan . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).

Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . right-click the connector grip.3D MEP. NOTE When drawing duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. and click Draw Duct. click the corner where the Top. double-click MEP . 15 On the ViewCube. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. select 9' 10 1/2". Front. select the top right diffuser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 11 On the Options Bar. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. for Offset. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 14 In the Project Browser.

The ductwork is automatically created. Also. 22 Using the same method. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. it is considered a closed loop.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. in space 115. the color fill indicates the flow value. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning.

27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 30 Press Esc twice. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and click to select it.

37 Press Esc to clear the selection. select a segment of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Constraints. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click OK. for Flow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.Airflow. such as a plenum. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. under Mechanical . clear Restrict Height.

You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Create return and supply piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. including 2 base mounted pumps. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Then. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating.

on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you place mechanical equipment.rvt. click Training Files.

2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. in corridor 328. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Wall faces is selected. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan .2-6 Tons . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. and select WSHP . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.High Efficiency . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Horizontal . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Left Return .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

11 Press Enter and then press Esc.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Select the WSHP. as shown. click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.8 Click the corridor wall face. and enter 2'. verify that the WSHP is still selected. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. and in the Type Selector. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.

as shown. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click to place it in the mechanical room. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. select the 2 WSHPs. for Water Flow. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Click Modify. Click OK. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. enter 12 GPM. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Under Mechanical. enter 9'.

Create the logical connection between the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.21 Click Modify. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems.

Design is highlighted. analyses cannot be performed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . where it is easier to review the information. but without a corresponding system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. right-click the Systems column heading. 5 In the System Browser.rvt. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and click View ➤ Piping. Creating a Piping System | 115 . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Mech 330). 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.HVAC Plan .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You can create pipes to connect system components. Unlike logical connections (systems).

all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 10 On the Options Bar.In the System Browser. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. select the boiler. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and the Edit System tool is not active. This display indicates that the system is selected. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Assigning a system component to an existing system. As you assign equipment to systems. 12 In the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that on the Options Bar. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Therefore. while pressing Ctrl. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. select the 2 WSHPs. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.

20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 17 On the Options Bar. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. and select the cooling tower.Design. 19 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. Creating a Piping System | 117 . for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.HVAC Plan . double-click Roof . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.13 Click Finish Editing System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You have created the hydronic return system.

22 In the Select Connector dialog. and bypasses the cooling tower. In cooling mode. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 29 Right-click CHWS. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In heating mode. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 25 Select the boiler. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 28 Using the same method. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 23 Close the roof plan view. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. indicating the logical connection. and click OK. and click Select. and click Expand All. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).

for Water Flow. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. under Mechanical. and click OK. and click Properties. expand Piping. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. including the flow rate and size of the component. 32 In the System Browser. and click Column Settings. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.In the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can view several parameters. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.

and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . A system preview displays in red.Design is highlighted.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. click Training Files. and click OK.HVAC Plan . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). indicating that it’s the active view. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and click to select it. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. select CHWR. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). then the Select a System dialog displays. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Mech 330). select Mechanical Equipment. When you draw a box to select components. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 10 Click OK. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. you can place the cursor over a system component. the boiler. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Check None. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the system. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the Select a System dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 5 In the Filter dialog.

14 On the Generate Layout tab. For Inset. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. select Perimeter. structural beams. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 13 Click Cancel. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. verify that Solutions is selected. or architectural components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. It does not reference the architecture. enter 1' 6''. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. duct.11 On the Options Bar.

Verify the flow In a previous exercise. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and the flow for the other is 12. 19 In the drawing area. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. and press Tab 3 times. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.16 Click Finish Layout. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. the flow for one WSHP is 18. With each Tab. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally.

24 Press Esc. and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 23 Under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and access its instance properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 28 In the Project Browser. the Number of Elements is now 8. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. which propagates flow throughout the system. 32 Click Finish Editing System. Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). you physically close the CHWR loop. double-click Level 1 . 27 On the System Tools panel. Next. click Edit System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and click Cancel. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. under Mechanical. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 38 Using the same method. 35 Using the drag control. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. as shown. select a WSHP. access its instance properties. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.

select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 1' 6''. For Slope. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. select CHWS. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. and then click OK. For Inset. 41 Click OK. enter 0''/12''.40 In the Select a System dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. Click Settings. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

as shown. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.

or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or manually modify the pipe. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution. Add piping to close the supply loop. To create the piping system. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 51 Click Finish Layout. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Either relocate the system components. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.50 Using the same method. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . double-click 3D HVAC Building. and the return pipes are magenta.HVAC Plan . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . as shown.rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. indicating that it’s the active view. As you work in the training file. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. as shown.

select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.

14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the return pipe riser. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The connections are automatically created. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 13 In the plan view. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. 12 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe.

In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 1' . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. for Offset. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and press Enter.7''. enter 2'. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and you select 1 connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.

Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 18 Press Esc twice. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. As you place piping runs that are close together. and the appropriate fittings are created. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and click OK. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. as shown. and select it. select the primary base mounted pump.

29 If necessary. and when the connector point displays. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 28 Press Esc. click to connect to the pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. you select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector.

33 Press Esc. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. for Offset. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 9' 6''. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . type 1'.

37 Click Modify. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. You now have a closed loop system. Next. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click. you validate the flow through the system.

The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. for Cooling Water Flow. notice that under Mechanical. under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. When you create the pumps in parallel. 48 In the plan view. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. right-click. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. the value is 0 GPM. 44 In the 3D view. In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . Connect the cooling tower Next. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 41 Using the same method.50 or 50% of the Flow. The flow is being propagated through the piping. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). under Mechanical. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 43 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. 40 Click Cancel. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. view the properties for the secondary pump. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). and click OK. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 42 Click OK. 46 Press Esc. select the cooling tower.

49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and close the dialog. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Valves In this exercise. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. When the valve is open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and is heated by the boiler. click Training Files.

2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 8 Press Esc twice.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and select Ball Valve . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 4 On the Options Bar.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Valves | 143 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.HVAC Plan . verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The bypass valve is closed by default. indicating that it’s the active view.

parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). under Mechanical. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. and select Ball Valve . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and click Element Properties. and click OK. 19 Using the same method.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 145 . right-click. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and select Ball Valve . In heating mode.

HVAC Plan . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. as shown. Initially. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.22 Using the method you just learned.

This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. for Schemes.Flow. select Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 147 . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Size. and click OK. and click OK.

select Larger of Connector and Calculated. enter 5 FPS. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). for Branch Sizing. and enter 2. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 13 Press Esc. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Select And.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Friction. and click to select the branch. and for Velocity. Under Constraints.25 FT/100ft. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Click OK.

2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. Using the System Inspector. click Training Files. pressure. and double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design ➤ 3D Views. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Inspecting the System | 149 . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.rvt.

An inspection flag reports the section number. flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. This information helps you modify the system design. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. as required. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.

and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 10 Click Finish.88 psi. targeting those systems that need attention. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and the Pressure Loss is 1. the Static Pressure is 7.67 psi. as shown. and to size pipe. inspect Section 6 again. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to validate them. select 90° F. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.89 psi.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 9 Using the same method. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature. In this exercise. and click OK.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.

6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Show to view all of the system components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. After you assign components to a system.HVAC Plan . In the System Browser. If you place components without assigning them to a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and click View. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. right-click the Systems titlebar. After you have assigned all components to systems. and double-click Level 3 . double-click Level 1 . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 9 Right-click CHWS. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and for pipe sizing. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 4 In the System Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. As you learned when placing components. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Warnings display. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. For example. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.rvt. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 7 In the System Browser. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.Design. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. the pipe is associated with that system.Design. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. thus assigning the components to a system.

13 Right-click CHWR.Design floor plan. 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 12 In the System Browser. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . expand the Unassigned folder. and select Level 3 .HVAC Plan . click Close. otherwise. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. right-click Hydronic Return. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Expand All.TIP If you have multiple views open. and confirm unassigned system components. 10 Using the same methods. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ For Factor. speeding up the design phase. distribution systems.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Click OK. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Copper. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.rvt.Wire Sizes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. ■ ■ For Material. You also add a wiring type. For Temperature Rating. As you place components and create circuits. enter THHN. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select 75. For Material. select Copper. select 90. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click Training Files. click (Open). In this exercise you review electrical settings.04. wiring. select Wiring Types. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Select Correction Factor. For Temperature. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . expand Wiring . enter 1.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Red. Click OK three times. for Custom Colors. Click Background Color. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.■ ■ For Value.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Use the System Browser to check your design. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. power circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. as you place lighting fixtures. Then. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. First. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. 167 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create power loads. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create a panel schedule.

Under Scheme Definition. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the color for Less Than 20.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range. click Training Files.00 fc. In the Color dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.rvt. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select the color legend. for Basic Colors. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Click OK. select Orange. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Average Estimated Illumination. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for the Spaces Category. You can create additional color schemes.

5 fc range is satisfied. zoom to space Library 219. 13 Click the Level 2 .Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.7 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The red field will clear once the +/. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).277. 8 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.5 fc range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.Lighting Ceiling plan. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 18 Click to place the fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 25 On the Options Bar. the fixtures will move accordingly. 23 Click OK. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

30 On the Options Bar.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select the 3 fixtures. select Multiple. 28 In the drawing area.

32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK. click Check None. and for Category.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. 36 In the Filter dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

select Multiple Alignment. click the ceiling grid line as shown. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied. 42 In the drawing area. 41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .

The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the light fixture IES files. In the next exercise. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open).rvt. click Training Files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .45 Press ESC to end the command.

2 Tile the views as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Lighting Color Fill plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Lighting Plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Under Electrical.00 lm. enter 162. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. enter . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ Click OK twice. for Color Preset. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Type Mark.85. click the value for Initial Intensity. for Ballast Loss Factor. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . enter . specify 15000. for Apparent Load. select Xenon and click OK. In the Name dialog.ies and click Open.277V and click OK. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Click OK. select T5 [HO]. enter F15. select 463T5_S.93. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click the value for Initial Color. ■ Under Photometrics. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Lamp. select Luminous Flux. In the Select File dialog.00 VA. ■ Click Apply. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics.

and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and for Category. 10 In the Filter dialog.277V. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click Check None.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

rvt. junction boxes. click (Open). Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Placing Switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the next exercise.Press Delete. you add switches. click Training Files. Junction Boxes. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and Receptacles | 183 . and receptacles to your design. Placing Switches.

277V. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch.

The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad.rfa and click Open. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Mark. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Offset.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter 9’0”. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219. Under Electrical. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK twice. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.14 Press ESC to end the command. note the Number of Poles is 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 15 Select the junction box. In the Type Properties dialog. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Level 2 . NOTE When entering values. enter JB-1NL. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 21 In the drawing area. Click Edit Type. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.

Select Size. and Receptacles | 187 . Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 26 In the System Browser. 23 In the System Browser. Expand General. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Voltage.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Select Load. Space Name. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. right-click and click Column Settings. 24 For any column. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Number of Elements. Click OK. Distribution System. Space Number. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. NOTE If necessary.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and Receptacles | 189 . select Copy and Multiple. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.rvt. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click (Open). You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click Training Files.

6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 8 Select the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Max. enter PP-2B. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 20. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A. For Panel Name. for Distribution System. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Click OK. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. #1 Pole Breakers. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System.

Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 23 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. enter LP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. which is the logical connection between the elements. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Loads. For Panel Name. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 20. and for Category. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 20 In the drawing area. for Max. zoom to space Instruction 221.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.28 Press ESC to end the command.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Wires. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.Loads. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. Click OK. for Hot Conductors. click Check None. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. except without wire. enter 2. 44 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 41 In the Filter dialog. click (Open). 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. Voltage. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Distribution System. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Rating. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. expand Power. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 13 In the System Browser. and verify that Load. Expand Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings.rvt. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and then expand circuit 1. click Training Files. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

under Electrical. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 With the junction box still selected. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice. click Edit Type. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. for Type Mark. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click Tags. Click OK. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click below the first one to place it. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Identity Data. enter FR4. 47 In the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click Yes. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.

Click OK. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.rfa. For Circuit Number. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. and click Apply.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter a comma. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Deselect Break and for Suffix. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click Save. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click OK. for File Name. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 56 In the Filter dialog. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . and for Category. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Next you create a switch system. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Break. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. click Check None. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

rvt. click Training Files. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. under Electrical Lighting. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. click (Open). 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Switch ID. enter a. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Switch System | 205 .

15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter b.Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. for switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. Click OK. under Electrical . 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Circuits are used for power. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 7 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Click OK. Next you create a circuit and size wire. click (Open). 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. lighting. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 2 In the drawing area. and data systems. select Electrical Fixtures. click Check None.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and for Category. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.

under Electrical . Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.rfa. select Wiring. and click Element Properties. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. Click OK. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and in the right pane. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and click Open. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.Loads. enter 2. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 13 Select the wire again. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 19 Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.

and click to select the circuit.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Creating Power Loads | 209 . Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel.

as shown. in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.26 Press Delete. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. 29 In space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

select panel LP-2B. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Finally.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. 3 In the Electrical space. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Training Files. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Open. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.

3616 VA). enter 30A. Phase B 3636 VA. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#12. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Scroll down. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. click Rebalance Loads.3712 VA. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 1-#10. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. 14 Close the warning dialog. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . B. 1-#12. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 6 Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. for Rating. and Phase C .

24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.rvt. 17 Close the warning dialog. and click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.15 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. enter 25A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Training Files. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. under Electrical . for Rating. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. enter 30A. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. click (Open). 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a panel schedule. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. under Electrical . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating.Loads. Select PP-2B. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open E601 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 7 Select the schedule. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Appearance. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Header Text. 11 Click OK twice. for Font Size. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Under Header Text. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. for Font. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. enter 3/32. 4 Close the report. enter 1/8. expand Sheets (all). select Bold and Italic. click (Open). under Other. for Font Size. click Edit. 5 In the Project Browser.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. select Berlin Sans FB. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. click Training Files. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Under Body Text.Panel Schedules.

4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. select space Lounge 212. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Expand Unassigned. Checking Your Design | 215 . 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. press TAB once. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. each with a load of 180VA. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit.

select MDP-1. for Panel. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 17 In the drawing area.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 18 Select panel LP-2C. zoom to space Electrical 214. 16 Close the details dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. planning is critical to a successful design.Sanitary. and click OK. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 219 . Adding a pipe size. type PVC . right-click PVC . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 2 In the Project Browser. In this lesson. in addition to loading existing families.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Vent. 4 In the Name dialog. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Design is open.rvt. and click Properties.Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. In this exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 . you create a PVC pipe type.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.

under Pipe Types. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Tee.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.DWV. select Sanitary. In the Project Browser.PVC . select Tee Vent . 10 On the Selection panel. select Plastic. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. Cross. 21 In the right pane. under Mechanical. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 27 For the new pipe size. click Modify. click Training Files.rfa.DWV: Standard. 15 For System Type. select Tee. For Offset. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.0''. 22 Click New Size.PVC . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter 10°. 6 Click OK. 17 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 26 Click OK. 24 For Inside Diameter. 18 For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Vent is listed.Sch 40 . PVC . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 25 For Outside. click Pipe Settings. enter 1/2''. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter 5/8''. select Branch. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the right panel. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Tap. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 27/32''.PVC . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . and click Main. select Sanitary. select None. and click OK.Sch 40 . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. for Nominal. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. for Material. enter -4' .

add a hot water heater. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system. and hot and cold water piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system.

as shown. you add 2 toilets. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Plumbing Plan . 1 urinal. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . including the men’s room (space Male 107). NOTE To identify a space name and number.Design is open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.rvt.

6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.1. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel. and 3 sinks. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 1 wall-mounted urinal.Flush Valve . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . under Water Closet . in the Type Selector.6 gpf. as shown.Wall Mounted. select Public . against the left wall.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 5 On the Placement panel.

Wall Hung. use the reference line to center the fixture. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again. under Urinal . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. zoom in closer. and press Esc. above the first in the standard toilet space. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.7 Click to place another toilet. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.) 8 Press Esc.

14 Click Modify. click Place on Face. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). 12 On the Placement panel. select 5''x5'' Strainer . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . under Floor Drain .Rectangular. In placing the fixture.2'' Drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.

rvt. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). right-click in the System Browser table heading. In this exercise. and review the components listed under this system.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and a floor drain. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. a urinal. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Design is open. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 8 In the Filter dialog. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 In the plan view.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. and verify that Level 1 . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. clear Lines (<Overhead>). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click OK.

12 On the Edit System panel. expand Sanitary.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. If you deselected the drain. so the Create Sanitary System is available. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. click Finish Editing System. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. enter Sanitary 107. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 13 In the Systems Browser. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 11 On the Options Bar. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. for System Name.

at the midpoint of the detail lines. and click OK. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. select one of the components in the system. as shown. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. a toilet. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.

27 Click Modify. select Branch. select Intersections. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. enter -1' 0''. 25 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select 4''. for Solution Type. and click Settings. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system.19 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 21 On Options Bar. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 24 In the left pane. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. enter -4'-0”. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter -1' 0''. and modify it to meet project requirements. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Slope. and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. enter 1/8'' / 12''. The default settings are automatically modified. for Diameter. You accept this suggested solution. select Main. 23 For Offset.

select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown.30 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 31 Click Modify.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

in the Type Selector. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan . 5 On the Placement panel. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. select 22''x22'' . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. under Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . as shown. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. 4 On the Element panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Training Files.Rectangular.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.7 Click Modify. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. enter 2' 4''. On the Options Bar. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. and press Enter to create a second sink. TIP When entering dimensions. select Multiple. 8 Select the sink. For example.

Press Esc. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 On the Edit System panel. 11 In the System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Finish Editing System. 12 In the drawing area.

under Design ➤ Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view. 20 Select the fitting. double-click 3D Plumbing. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). with the tee fitting selected. 19 In the 3D view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 21 Select the tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. 22 In the plan view.In the System Browser. and click Draw Pipe.

for Slope. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. for Offset. 24 On the Options Bar.6''. When you press the Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 26 On the Options Bar. In this example. and click Apply. enter 1/8'' / 12''. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 2' . press Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 27 Click Modify.

Sch 40 . 31 Click Modify. move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC . and when the vertical center line displays. 29 In the Type Selector. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 30 In the 3D view. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .DWV. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting.

right-click the right connector. you add pipe segments to the double wye. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Draw Pipe. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. enter 6''. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. on the Options Bar.33 With the fitting selected. enter 1'. In the next steps. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the fitting. for Offset.

42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. as shown. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. enter 6''. 47 Move the cursor down. press Spacebar. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and press Esc. right-click the bottom connector. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 48 Click Modify. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method.

53 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 56 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . 51 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. under Trap P .PVC . 55 In the 3D view. select Standard.DWV. 52 In the plan view. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.

and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click in the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor to the left. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. In the plan view. enter 6''. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. select the left P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye.. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.

In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types. as shown. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. and select a proposed solution. select PVC Sanitary. click Finish to select the recommended solution.■ In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl.

and verify the slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 62 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. for Slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Finish.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Training Files.rvt. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.

DWV. and click the intersection to place the fitting. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Design. click Modify. and click Draw Pipe.Plumbing Plan . as shown. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Select the tee. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.PVC . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select the elbow fitting on the right. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 10 In the 3D view. right-click the top connector. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click to draw the pipe.Design.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Section view.Floor level line. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 9 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the vertical stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Sch 40 . 7 On the Selection panel.Overall. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select Standard.

DWV. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 12 Select the fitting. select Standard. 15 Press Esc. enter 1'-0”. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 On the Options Bar. and click the rotate control to change the orientation.PVC . 17 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 . 13 Click the rotate control once. under Plug . for Offset.11 Click Modify. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 18 In the plan view. as shown.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.19 Click Modify.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.rvt.

select Domestic Hot Water. double-click 3D Plumbing . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. enter 9' 3''. draw a selection box to select the toilets. expand Unassigned. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.Overall. and click OK. To minimize opportunities for piping interference.Design ➤ 3D Views. if necessary. select Branch. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. select Main. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. select Plumbing Fixtures. For Offset. and for System Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 14 In the System Browser. 7 In the left pane. select Pipe Types: Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.) 10 Click OK. and sinks. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. for System Type. 15 In the plan view. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Branch. 17 In the Filter dialog. 4 In the right pane. select Domestic Cold Water. 9 In the left pane.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Design ➤ Plumbing . (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Pipe Types: Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. For Offset. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. click Check None. for System Type. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 6 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . urinal. minimize the Sanitary system. and click Main.

24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Finish Editing System. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the System Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. enter DCW 107. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. For Flow Conversion Method. Notice that the water main displays in blue. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Edit System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 19 On the System Tools panel.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 21 On the Edit System panel.

and click to place the pipe. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. select the sink above the urinal. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 3' . 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. For Slope. as shown. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. for Offset. and press Enter. select 3/4''. 28 In the Type Selector.2 7/8''. right-click the top DCW connector. as shown. select Water. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. and click Draw Pipe. 33 Click Modify. enter 7''. and press Enter. under Pipe Types. connect the second toilet. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. For Offset. 34 In the plan view. 30 In the plan view. click to the left of the urinal. for Offset. 35 In the Type Selector.25 Using the same method. enter 10'. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and click the connector. enter 4'0”. at the intersection of the water main pipe. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor to the right. enter 0”/12”.

39 Move the cursor to the left. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 41 Select the top sink. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. and click OK. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click to connect to the main cold water line. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

you create the hot water system.44 Using the same method. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Overall. while pressing Ctrl. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . expand the Unassigned folder. and verify that Level 1 . 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. select the 3 sinks. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. verify that DCW 107 is selected. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select 0. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Water Heater . the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). as shown. Default Domestic Hot Water.6 Gallon. When designing systems. and click OK. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the Type Selector. 14 Click Modify. In later steps.Tankless. 15 In the System Browser. 13 In the plan view. in the Unassigned folder. for System Name. and click Edit System. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 10 In the System Browser.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Domestic Cold Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. you edit the system to add equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.

enter 1' 6''.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and press Enter. and select Draw Pipe. Slope: 0''/12''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 24 Move the cursor up. enter 10’. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . right-click the middle left connector. as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. select the water heater. 19 Select the water heater. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. click Finish Editing System. 22 In the Type Selector. and click the water main line. Offset: 4' 6''. 23 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit System panel.

36 Move the cursor down. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. select a sink. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1''. 33 On the Edit System panel. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. as shown. for Diameter. select 4'-6''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 1' 6''. and click Draw Pipe. 30 On the System Tools panel. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. click Edit System. and press Enter. for Offset. click Finish Editing System. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor to the right. enter 9' 0''. and in the System Selector. and on the Placement Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view.

39 Move the cursor down. 41 Move the cursor down. as shown. and press Enter. enter 1’. enter 2' 8''. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset. 40 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 42 Click Modify.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Duplicate.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create a new pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In this lesson. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 2 Right-click Standard. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.autodesk. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this tutorial. 267 . However. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. you can choose to save your work. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

In the left pane. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For System Type. and click Properties. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. you create project parameters and work with schedules. structural beams. select Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. or architectural components. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. However. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For Offset. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. verify that 9' 0" is selected.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. In this exercise. For Offset. For Pipe Type. for Material. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. and then click OK. click Rename. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Carbon Steel. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. under Mechanical. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Main. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. duct. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. Next. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 6 In the Project Browser. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties.

4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Training Files. select space Instruction 221 as shown. Under Categories. select Spaces. click Add. 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 6 In the drawing area. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. select the upper half of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. select Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. 8 Using a crossing window. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. and then click OK. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. right-click. for Name. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Zone 1. verify that only Spaces are selected.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Zone 2. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. including a calculated value parameter. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then access instance properties. 13 Using the same method. under Fire Protection. to which you add various parameters. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection.

11 Click OK twice. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Maximum Spacing. and click Field Format. For Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 14 Select the new header. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 10 In the Format dialog. For Group parameter under. The schedule displays. for Name. 7 Click OK. select Length. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Spaces. 6 Using the same method. select Feet and fractional inches. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Light. Select Schedule keys. For Rounding. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. indicating that it’s the active view. Click OK. select Fire Protection. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click on each column separator. For Key name. Click OK.Design is highlighted. 9 On the Formatting tab. enter 15. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Type of Parameter. select Maximum Spacing. For Units. In the Maximum Spacing column. click the Formatting tab. and on the ribbon. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select To the nearest 1'. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. click Add Parameter. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .

Unobstructed Ordinary. and press Enter. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. enter 130. select Spaces. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. under Available fields. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

under Other. select Level. For Type. select Fixed. 22 Click OK twice. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. and click View Properties. For Units. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select 0 decimal place. select Number. click Edit. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Then by. For Discipline. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Minimum Sprinklers. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. In the Fields dialog. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. enter Minimum Sprinklers. click . for Sort by. select Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Click OK. and click Field Format. Select Header and Blank line. select Common. 19 Click the Formatting tab. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Rounding. and click OK. for Sorting/Grouping. For Formula.

for Filter. 30 Click OK twice. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and select Totals only. ■ In the Format dialog. click Edit. select Number. Under Field formatting. select Level equals Level 2. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Grand totals. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Level. For Then by (second instance).■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. At the bottom of the dialog. and then click Field Format. select Hidden field. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. for Filter by. and then select Hidden field. right-click the schedule. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinkler Zone. For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 In the drawing area. For Fields.

click Edit. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. delete the word Maximum. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Available fields. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Fields. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and select Totals only. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. under Other. for Embedded Schedule.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and click View Properties. select Count. double-click Type. and Count. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. Under Field formatting. select Grand totals. select Calculate totals. System Name. For Category. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. On the Formatting tab. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog.

44 In the schedule. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. As a result. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. but their values are not determined. Unobstructed. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 46 With the space still selected.Fire Protection Plan Design. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. select Light. select space 221 Instruction. and click OK. and access the instance properties.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select space 221 Instruction. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. select Ordinary. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. under Identity Data. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 48 In the floor plan. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the spacing parameter values are evident. double-click FP . 41 In the plan view. 43 Click Cancel.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow. As you create the system. If the tutorial training files are not present. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you will understand the process. However.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2 . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. go to http://www. 279 . you can choose to save your work. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you place the sprinklers. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. methodology.rvt. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.

IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When there is a small misalignment. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 3 In the Project Browser. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. After placing the initial sprinkler. When this happens. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.

Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and select Sprinkler . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 11 In the drawing area. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Pendent . and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. while pressing Ctrl.

Also. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Next. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

200B. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 19 In the floor plan. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 11. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Next. and click Element Properties. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. enter 10' 6". 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and press Enter. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. you adjust the offset. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". for Offset. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 29 Press Esc. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. specify a vertical offset. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. under Constraints. 25 Click OK. This number is determined in the schedule. 17 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. and 200C).Design. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected.FP_Ceiling view. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . Notice that the schedule updates. move the cursor to the right. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 14' 6". For Number. open Design ➤ FP . 18 Type WT. you place non-hosted sprinklers. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.

you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.rvt. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. However.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.30 Close the file with or without saving it. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. In this exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Fire Protection Plan . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and with piping (physical connection). In the next exercise. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). After creating the logical connection.Design is highlighted.

6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. click View ➤ Systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 Right-click the header. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. In the System Browser. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. within the Piping Systems folder. and select Piping. Creating a Piping System | 285 . as shown. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. As you assign sprinklers to systems.

and select the system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. Next. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . providing system editing tools. The Generate Layout tools are activated. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. select Branch. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and click Select. click Settings. place the cursor over a sprinkler. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and on the Options Bar. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. For Offset. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. indicating the logical connection. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. In the left pane. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 19 Click OK. and number of elements in the system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. press Tab. and a piping layout preview displays. 13 In the System Browser. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. select an initial piping layout. enter FP Wet_Zone2. The Edit Piping System panel displays. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . system equipment. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 15 In the drawing area. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. verify that Main is selected. 11 With the system still selected. 12 On the Options Bar. for System Name. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. For Pipe Type.Wet is selected. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected.

The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and select solution 5. as shown. click Solutions. verify that Network is selected. select 2". enter -12' 0". 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. When the layout is finished.20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. 23 For Offset. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). click Place Base. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and green represents branch lines). The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. In general.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. A (parallel movement control) displays. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. click Modify. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. On the Generate Layout panel.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 32 If necessary. and various manual pipe creation tools. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or that offset elevations are incorrect. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Next. the Connect Into tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. select a different layout solution. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.

2 Zoom in. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 3 If necessary.Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. and select the elbow fitting as shown.

air terminals. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 5 In the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Layout. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit System panel. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. and pipe or duct is created. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). click Add To System. for Solution Type. verify that Network is selected. or a system component to display system tools. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. radiators. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 In the corridor. click Finish Editing System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. mechanical equipment. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and select solution 5. you can select the pipe or duct. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 14 Close the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected.

23 View the result in the 3D view. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and then tile the views. right-click. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 28 In the drawing area. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 29 Using the same method. 25 Select the sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Offset.20 Open Design ➤ FP . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and then press Esc. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 21 In the Piping Plan. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. select 9'. and click Draw Pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 31 In the plan view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. ■ 6 Press Esc. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select 1/4" = 1'-0". click Training Files.Fire Protection Plan . double-click on the section head to open the section view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. for Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 4 On the Options Bar. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

select 4".21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter.

and then tag the piping as shown. 26 Using the same method. select 1 1/4". 23 Close the 3D view. for Diameter. and maximize the floor plan.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. The pipe diameter is modified. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. 24 In the drawing area.

304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You added tags to pipes. In this exercise. In this tutorial. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you created a wet fire protection system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. For additional practice. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.

305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. If the view included detail graphics. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click OK. 307 . under Floor Plans. and apply a view template. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Copy of Level 1. and view references. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. dependent views. matchlines.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Properties. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.

You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. 9 Click OK. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click Rename. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. and then press Esc. 6 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. views and put them on the sheet. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. more focused. 4 Using the same method. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click OK. 2 Right-click the dependent view title.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. create dependent views for areas B and C. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 10 In the drawing area. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

on the Options Bar. For Line Pattern. Creating Dependent Views | 309 ./ ---). and click OK. For Line Weight. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select black. In the Color dialog. select Double Dash 5/8".12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select 11. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 13 Press Esc twice. click the current value. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. for Target view. Click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 21 Using the same method. and then press Esc.

and zoom to each of the view references. as shown. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 25 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 27 Using the same method. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and click Apply Default View Template. 4 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and select the section box. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. enter Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water. For Default View Template. right-click 3D Plumbing. For Sub-Discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. The section crop lines no longer display. select Documentation. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. select Plumbing.rvt. for View Name. click Training Files. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Plumbing Isometric. and click Properties. Click OK. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. Under Graphics. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. for View Classification. 2 Zoom in. right-click Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and click to select it.

312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 12 Using the same method. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select 3. Click Apply. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.9 Right-click. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select Dash. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. and then click OK.

and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click. as shown).

press Tab 3 times. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . In the drawing area. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. On the View Control Bar. and click to select it.15 Press Esc. Right-click. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.Domestic Water view with detailing. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Sanitary Waste. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .

as shown. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. and click to place the spot slope annotation. verify that Common is selected. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. When the view is associated with a sheet. click on the Format value. In the Format dialog. 25 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 21 Click OK twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. for Rounding. select To the nearest 1/8". 26 Close the file with or without saving it. For Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 24 Move the cursor above the pipe.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units.

316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). for Scale.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4"=1'-0''. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. under Sheets (all). select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. Click OK.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. double-click M601 . 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. drag it to the sheet. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. for Line Weight.

and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Click OK.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. for View Name. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select the viewport. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. right-click the callout view.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

right-click the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. and click Rename. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 26 In the Rename View dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Typical WSHP Detail.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Apply View Template. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. under Names. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

321 . you learn how to: ■ add text notes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. symbols. duct tags. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ work with model-based components.

under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.Creating Annotations In this exercise. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 With the text still selected. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and then click Right Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and a segment of rectangular duct. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. 15 On the Options Bar. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.9 Press Esc twice. Creating Annotations | 323 . a segment of round duct. as shown. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser.

move diffuser tags off the ductwork. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. If necessary. 17 Click Modify. click Load. 21 In the Load Family dialog.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. clear Leader. and click OK. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. for Ducts. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click Open. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa. 24 On the Options Bar.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 22 In the Tags dialog. under Category.

and then press Esc. Leader. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. as shown. 32 In the drawing area.25 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 325 . select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 26 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 31 On the Options Bar. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.

for Leader. as shown.33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 34 In the drawing area.

and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. not simply an instance property.36 Press Esc twice. and click OK. and lock lighting fixtures. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions | 327 . you use temporary dimensions to locate. for Leader Arrowhead. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. select Dot Open 1/16". lay out. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and all elements of that type are affected. 37 In the drawing area. That’s because you changed a type property. select the last tag placed.

Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. select the dimension line. 12 Press Esc. click Training Files. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then select the interior face of the wall. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. On the Options Bar. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension.

Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. and press Enter.3 1/2").13 Using the same method. Because the dimensions are locked. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend | 329 . linework. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 8'. and offset them 8' from the wall. and notes. 19 Using the same methods. annotation symbols. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 16 Press Esc. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

5 Click in the drawing area.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Training Files. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 10 Using the same method. select 1/4" = 1' -0". Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. For View. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Floor Plan. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Scale. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.8 Neck. enter Diffuser Legend.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.rvt. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Click OK.

annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 331 .11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 26 Press Esc. 21 Press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. The selected detail lines are now thin. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc.DROP and its text note. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.

30 Select Spot Elevation . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. enter E. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 34 Using the method learned previously. Creating a Legend | 333 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. detail groups. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A drafting view using detail components. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A detail callout that references another view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 335 . click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.rvt. and text.113 East elevation view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .

place Power Riser .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 5 In the drawing area. 8 Using the same method. 7 Drag the Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 4 On the Options Bar. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then modify and align the views.113 East on the sheet. and click to place it.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. clear Leader. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 2 panelboards. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Next. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.

and click Activate View. right-click. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. select the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. giving the appearance of a single view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 13 Right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . under Identity Data.

Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 22 Press Esc. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. right-click. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Activate View. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. you add wiring to the diagram. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 21 Using the drag control. select the 113 East elevation view.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . and then click OK. click New. 2 Close the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Chain is selected. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. enter Electrical Power. As you draw. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 9 Beginning at the transformer. indicating that it’s the active view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the New Subcategory dialog. Under Modify Subcategories. 8 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. notice that there are no snaps active. select 6.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .113 North view.rvt. click Training Files. and click OK. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. for Name. for Line Weight. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. expand Lines. In the Line Styles dialog.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. enter 1/8". 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. for Offset. as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . so that the result is as shown. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 28 Click above the cap. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. as shown. 29 Click Modify. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl.

5. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.36 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 3/32". and press Enter. enter 0 0. You enter exact values for each line length. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 40 Press Esc. for Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.

expand Groups ➤ Detail. 50 With the group selected. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and then press Esc. enter 0 0. click on the length dimension value. Press Esc. Using the same method. 47 In the drawing area. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and press Enter. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .25. select all 3 lines. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. for Name. while pressing Ctrl.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. and click OK.125. you can ensure that they stay together. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter Ground.

and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 54 Select the group. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. TP-2B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.51 Using the method learned previously. 52 Select the detail group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.

and will place it on sheet E01. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and click Rename. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 2 Right-click the copy. and click OK. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. for Name. In later exercises. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Zoom in to view the section. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.

and then click the corner where the Top. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube. Back. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and Left sides converge. click Home. and then press Esc.6 Select the section box.

Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Under Names. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3D HVAC Iso. Click OK. right-click. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and click Apply View Template. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. select 3D Views. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Walkthroughs. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 19 Complete the text labels. Typical. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Move the cursor down and to the left. 15 Using the same method. (Right). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. and click to specify the second leader point.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and under Extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click on the crop region.To rotate and reposition a text label. under Extents. 25 Click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.

Click OK. Place a detail component. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the isometric view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. For Scale. 30 Close the file with or without saving it.29 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" = 1'-0". and click Properties. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. right-click the view name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 3 In the Project Browser.

4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Click OK. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as the rectangle start point. 9 Zoom in to the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 12 On the Element panel. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. For View Classification. for Sub-Discipline. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Documentation. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. click the point at the top of the drain. 13 In the drawing area. select Plumbing. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser.

17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Type. and click OK. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. (Line). and then press Esc. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. select C. 18 With the filled region still selected. 23 In the drawing area.I. select the filled region. Concrete. 21 In the drawing area. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.P. 22 Click Modify. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 20 Select 1.

33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click to select them. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.28 Click Modify. select Multiple. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 31 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 34 Press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.

and then press Esc. (Rectangle). as shown. and then select the side of the slab above the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 45 Using the method learned previously. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

select the Flashing Membrane group. and then click to select them. and click OK. draw wide detail lines as shown. as shown.D. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 49 Click Modify. 52 In the Create Group dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain. for Name. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.55 Press Esc. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .

71 Click Modify. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar. 72 If necessary.62 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 64 Press Esc twice. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. as shown. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select Leader and Free End. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and then click OK. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 81 Select the text note. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 76 To select the leader start point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 80 Press Esc twice.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail.

Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc. 88 In the drawing area. open P103 . select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and click to place it. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc twice.

■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Click OK. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For Import units. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For Colors. you import a CAD detail drawing. Click Open. For A-----NPP. select Auto-Detect. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Visible. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select 3. For Layers. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.dwg. for Line Weight. select Black and White. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.rvt. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.

Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. select the viewport title. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 In the drawing area. 11 Press Esc. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. open P103 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.8 Type ZF.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful